1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

Metal Carports & Carport Kits For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 2481–2520 of 2723 resultsSorted by price: low to high

30×80 Hobby Space

2,400 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×80 steel building delivers 2,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×80 Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $37,350
12
30×80 Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$42,600$37,350SAVE $5,250
or $778/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×80Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

30×80 Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 30×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 2,400 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 2,400 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Hobby Space·Size30×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$37,350$42,600Save $5,250
or as low as $778/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×80
30×80
this size
$37,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 2,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 2,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X80-HOBBY-SPACEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

30 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 30×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 2,400 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBar + game zoneGuest suite + bath + storage30′ × 80′ · 2,400 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 96+ guests. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 2,400 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×80 Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
2,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width30'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space2,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby space
Everyday hobby space
2,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby space + seasonal storage
hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×80 Hobby Space — what makes it different.

2,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$778/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×80 hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $778/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×80?

2,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 80′ footprint with 2,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $19,200–$28,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×80 Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×80 Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
31×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$10,800+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 30×80

Metal Garage

30×80 metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage →
🏡 30×80

Workshop / Hobby Space

30×80 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 30×80

Metal Carport / Open Shelter

30×80 metal carport / open shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport / Open Shelter →
🏢 30×80

Commercial Steel Building

30×80 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 30×80

RV Cover / Boat Storage

30×80 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 30×80

Home Gym / Training Facility

30×80 home gym / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Training Facility →
🌾 30×80

Metal Barn / Farm Storage

30×80 metal barn / farm storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Farm Storage →
🎯 30×80

Man Cave / Studio Building

30×80 man cave / studio building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / Studio Building →
🏭 30×80

Factory / Warehouse

30×80 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 30×80

Government / Institutional

30×80 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 30×80

Equestrian / Tack Building

30×80 equestrian / tack building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →
🏛️ 30×80

Houses of Worship

30×80 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
🏡 30×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

30×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏡 30×80

RV Motorhome Storage

30×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🏢 30×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

30×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏢 30×80

Office

30×80 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 30×80 hobby space cost?

A 30×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $37,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $778/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×80 hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×80 hobby space?

Almost always for 2,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×80 hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×80 hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×80 hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $778/month on a 30×80 hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 30×80 hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×80 hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 30×80 hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$37,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

30×80 Hobby Space

2,400 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

30′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 30×80 steel building delivers 2,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
30×80 Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $37,350
12
30×80 Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$42,600$37,350SAVE $5,250
or $778/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings30×80Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

30×80 Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 30×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 2,400 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 2,400 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Hobby Space·Size30×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$37,350$42,600Save $5,250
or as low as $778/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 30×80
30×80
this size
$37,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 2,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 2,400 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-30X80-HOBBY-SPACEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

30 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 30×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 2,400 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBar + game zoneGuest suite + bath + storage30′ × 80′ · 2,400 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 96+ guests. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 2,400 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 30×80 Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
2,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 30×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width30'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space2,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby space
Everyday hobby space
2,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby space + seasonal storage
hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

30×80 Hobby Space — what makes it different.

2,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$778/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 30×80 hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $778/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 30×80?

2,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 30′ × 80′ footprint with 2,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $19,200–$28,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 30×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 30×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 30×80 Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 30×80 Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
31×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$10,800+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 30×80

Metal Garage

30×80 metal garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage →
🏡 30×80

Workshop / Hobby Space

30×80 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 30×80

Metal Carport / Open Shelter

30×80 metal carport / open shelter configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport / Open Shelter →
🏢 30×80

Commercial Steel Building

30×80 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 30×80

RV Cover / Boat Storage

30×80 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 30×80

Home Gym / Training Facility

30×80 home gym / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Training Facility →
🌾 30×80

Metal Barn / Farm Storage

30×80 metal barn / farm storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn / Farm Storage →
🎯 30×80

Man Cave / Studio Building

30×80 man cave / studio building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / Studio Building →
🏭 30×80

Factory / Warehouse

30×80 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 30×80

Government / Institutional

30×80 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 30×80

Equestrian / Tack Building

30×80 equestrian / tack building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$38,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian / Tack Building →
🏛️ 30×80

Houses of Worship

30×80 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
🏡 30×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

30×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏡 30×80

RV Motorhome Storage

30×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🏢 30×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

30×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏢 30×80

Office

30×80 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$39,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 30×80 hobby space cost?

A 30×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $37,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $778/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 30×80 hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 30×80 hobby space?

Almost always for 2,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 30×80 hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 30×80 hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 30×80 hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $778/month on a 30×80 hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 30×80 hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 30×80 hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 30×80 hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$37,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

40×80 Hobby Space

3,200 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

40′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×80 steel building delivers 3,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×80 Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $58,550
12
40×80 Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$66,750$58,550SAVE $8,200
or $1220/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×80Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×80 Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 40×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 3,200 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 3,200 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Hobby Space·Size40×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$58,550$66,750Save $8,200
or as low as $1220/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×80
40×80
this size
$58,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,200 sq ft enclosed
  • 3,200 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X80-HOBBY-SPACEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

40 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 40×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 3,200 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBar + game zoneGuest suite + bath + storage40′ × 80′ · 3,200 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 128+ guests. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 3,200 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×80 Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width40'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space3,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby space
Everyday hobby space
3,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby space + seasonal storage
hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×80 Hobby Space — what makes it different.

3,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1220/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×80 hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1220/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×80?

3,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 80′ footprint with 3,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $25,600–$38,400 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×80 Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×80 Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$14,400+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Space also viewed:

🏢 40×80

Commercial Warehouse

40×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×80

Fleet Garage

40×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×80 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$59,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×80

Retail Showroom

40×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×80

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×80 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🏡 40×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

40×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 40×80 hobby space cost?

A 40×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $58,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1220/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×80 hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×80 hobby space?

Almost always for 3,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×80 hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×80 hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×80 hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1220/month on a 40×80 hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 40×80 hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×80 hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 40×80 hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$58,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

40×80 Hobby Space

3,200 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

40′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×80 steel building delivers 3,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×80 Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $58,550
12
40×80 Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$66,750$58,550SAVE $8,200
or $1220/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×80Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×80 Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 40×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 3,200 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 3,200 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Hobby Space·Size40×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$58,550$66,750Save $8,200
or as low as $1220/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×80
40×80
this size
$58,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,200 sq ft enclosed
  • 3,200 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X80-HOBBY-SPACEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

40 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 40×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 3,200 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBar + game zoneGuest suite + bath + storage40′ × 80′ · 3,200 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 128+ guests. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 3,200 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×80 Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width40'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space3,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby space
Everyday hobby space
3,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby space + seasonal storage
hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×80 Hobby Space — what makes it different.

3,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1220/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×80 hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1220/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×80?

3,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 80′ footprint with 3,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $25,600–$38,400 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×80 Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×80 Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$14,400+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Space also viewed:

🏢 40×80

Commercial Warehouse

40×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×80

Fleet Garage

40×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×80 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$59,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×80

Retail Showroom

40×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×80

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×80 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🏡 40×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

40×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 40×80 hobby space cost?

A 40×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $58,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1220/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×80 hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×80 hobby space?

Almost always for 3,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×80 hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×80 hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×80 hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1220/month on a 40×80 hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 40×80 hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×80 hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 40×80 hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$58,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage

3,200 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

40′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×80 steel building delivers 3,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $58,550
12
40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$66,750$58,550SAVE $8,200
or $1220/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×80Boat & Trailer Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

40×80 delivers 3200 sq ft of everyday boat & trailer storage space. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Storage·Size40×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$58,550$66,750Save $8,200
or as low as $1220/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×80
40×80
this size
$58,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 12' Eave
  • Coastal Wind Pkg
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X80-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-boat toy garage.

40 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft+ doors clear towers and T-tops upright. 40×80 delivers 3200 sq ft of everyday boat & trailer storage space.

Multiple boat baysToy hauler / RV slotShop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft40′ × 80′ · 3,200 sq ft · multi-boat toy garage

Multiple boat bays · Toy hauler / RV slot · Shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft

Multiple boat bays at the front, toy hauler / rv slot in the middle, shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft at the rear. Capacity: 2+ boats or boat + toy hauler + tow rig. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Wind Pkg. Size affords: drive-through lane, mezzanine gear loft, compressor + rinse bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space3,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer storage
Everyday boat & trailer storage
3,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

3,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1220/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×80 boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1220/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×80?

3,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 80′ footprint with 3,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $25,600–$38,400 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$14,400+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏢 40×80

Commercial Warehouse

40×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×80

Fleet Garage

40×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×80 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$59,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×80

Retail Showroom

40×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×80

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×80 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 40×80

Hobby Space

40×80 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×80 boat & trailer storage cost?

A 40×80 boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $58,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1220/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×80 boat & trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×80 boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 3,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×80 boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×80 boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×80 boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1220/month on a 40×80 boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 40×80 boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×80 boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×80 boat & trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×80 boat & trailer storage typically adds $25,600–$38,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$58,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage

3,200 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

40′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×80 steel building delivers 3,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $58,550
12
40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$66,750$58,550SAVE $8,200
or $1220/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×80Boat & Trailer Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

40×80 delivers 3200 sq ft of everyday boat & trailer storage space. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Storage·Size40×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$58,550$66,750Save $8,200
or as low as $1220/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×80
40×80
this size
$58,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 12' Eave
  • Coastal Wind Pkg
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X80-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-boat toy garage.

40 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft+ doors clear towers and T-tops upright. 40×80 delivers 3200 sq ft of everyday boat & trailer storage space.

Multiple boat baysToy hauler / RV slotShop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft40′ × 80′ · 3,200 sq ft · multi-boat toy garage

Multiple boat bays · Toy hauler / RV slot · Shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft

Multiple boat bays at the front, toy hauler / rv slot in the middle, shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft at the rear. Capacity: 2+ boats or boat + toy hauler + tow rig. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Wind Pkg. Size affords: drive-through lane, mezzanine gear loft, compressor + rinse bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space3,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer storage
Everyday boat & trailer storage
3,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

3,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1220/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×80 boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1220/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×80?

3,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 80′ footprint with 3,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $25,600–$38,400 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×80 Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$14,400+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏢 40×80

Commercial Warehouse

40×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×80

Fleet Garage

40×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×80 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$59,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×80

Retail Showroom

40×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×80

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×80 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$60,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 40×80

Hobby Space

40×80 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$58,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×80 boat & trailer storage cost?

A 40×80 boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $58,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1220/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×80 boat & trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×80 boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 3,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×80 boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×80 boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×80 boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1220/month on a 40×80 boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 40×80 boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×80 boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×80 boat & trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×80 boat & trailer storage typically adds $25,600–$38,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$58,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Church & Event Hall

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Church & Event Hall | Steel and Stud — From $75,150
12
100×40 Church & Event Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,650$75,150SAVE $10,500
or $1566/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Church & Event Hall
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Church & Event Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

Small congregations and community groups use the 100×40 as sanctuary and fellowship space combined. 4,000 sq ft seats roughly 300 in rows or 200 banquet-style. Clear-span means no columns blocking sightlines. Higher.

You're viewing:Church & Event Hall·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,150$85,650Save $10,500
or as low as $1566/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$75,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • Clear-Span
  • Framed Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-CHURCH-EVENT-HALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. Small congregations and community groups use the 100×40 as sanctuary and fellowship space combined.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~400 in main sanctuary. 4,000 sq ft seats roughly 300 in rows or 200 banquet-style.

💡 Pro tip:300-Seat Capacity. Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Church & Event Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church & Event Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church & Event Hall spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church & Event Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday church & event hall
Everyday church & event hall
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church & event hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch & event hall + seasonal storage
church & event hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Church & Event Hall — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1566/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 church & event hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1566/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church & Event Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Church & Event Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Church & Event Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church & Event Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church & Event Hall also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church & Event Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 church & event hall cost?

A 100×40 church & event hall from Steel and Stud starts at $75,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1566/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 church & event hall price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud church & event hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 church & event hall?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church & event hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 church & event hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 church & event hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 church & event hall without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1566/month on a 100×40 church & event hall.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 church & event hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 church & event hall in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×40 church & event hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church & Event Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$75,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Church & Event Hall

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Church & Event Hall | Steel and Stud — From $75,150
12
100×40 Church & Event Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,650$75,150SAVE $10,500
or $1566/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Church & Event Hall
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Church & Event Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

Small congregations and community groups use the 100×40 as sanctuary and fellowship space combined. 4,000 sq ft seats roughly 300 in rows or 200 banquet-style. Clear-span means no columns blocking sightlines. Higher.

You're viewing:Church & Event Hall·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,150$85,650Save $10,500
or as low as $1566/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$75,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • Clear-Span
  • Framed Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-CHURCH-EVENT-HALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. Small congregations and community groups use the 100×40 as sanctuary and fellowship space combined.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~400 in main sanctuary. 4,000 sq ft seats roughly 300 in rows or 200 banquet-style.

💡 Pro tip:300-Seat Capacity. Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Church & Event Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church & Event Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church & Event Hall spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church & Event Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday church & event hall
Everyday church & event hall
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church & event hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch & event hall + seasonal storage
church & event hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Church & Event Hall — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1566/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 church & event hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1566/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church & Event Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Church & Event Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Church & Event Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church & Event Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church & Event Hall also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church & Event Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 church & event hall cost?

A 100×40 church & event hall from Steel and Stud starts at $75,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1566/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 church & event hall price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud church & event hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 church & event hall?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church & event hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 church & event hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 church & event hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 church & event hall without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1566/month on a 100×40 church & event hall.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 church & event hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 church & event hall in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×40 church & event hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church & Event Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Self-Storage Facility

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $75,050
12
100×40 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Self-storage developers divide the 100×40 into roughly 30-40 climate-controlled units ranging from 100×40 to 100×40. Interior partitions drop in after the shell is complete. A 10-foot ceiling keeps HVAC loads manageable.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$75,050
100×70
longer
$130,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Partition-Ready
  • Climate Controlled
  • Multiple Walk Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your drive-up storage layout.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Back-to-back rows share one covered aisle. Self-storage developers divide the 100×40 into roughly 30-40 climate-controlled units ranging from 100×40 to 100×40.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit rows A + BCenter drive aisleOffice + security corner100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · drive-up storage layout

Unit rows A + B · Center drive aisle · Office + security corner

Unit rows A + B at the front, center drive aisle in the middle, office + security corner at the rear. Capacity: ~30 mixed-size rentable units. Interior partitions drop in after the shell is complete.

💡 Pro tip:30+ Rental Units. Size affords: climate-controlled wing, cameras + gate, RV parking row.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×40 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 100×40 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×40 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Self-Storage Facility

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $75,050
12
100×40 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Self-storage developers divide the 100×40 into roughly 30-40 climate-controlled units ranging from 100×40 to 100×40. Interior partitions drop in after the shell is complete. A 10-foot ceiling keeps HVAC loads manageable.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$75,050
100×70
longer
$130,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Partition-Ready
  • Climate Controlled
  • Multiple Walk Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your drive-up storage layout.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Back-to-back rows share one covered aisle. Self-storage developers divide the 100×40 into roughly 30-40 climate-controlled units ranging from 100×40 to 100×40.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit rows A + BCenter drive aisleOffice + security corner100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · drive-up storage layout

Unit rows A + B · Center drive aisle · Office + security corner

Unit rows A + B at the front, center drive aisle in the middle, office + security corner at the rear. Capacity: ~30 mixed-size rentable units. Interior partitions drop in after the shell is complete.

💡 Pro tip:30+ Rental Units. Size affords: climate-controlled wing, cameras + gate, RV parking row.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×40 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 100×40 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×40 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Livestock Barn

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Livestock Barn | Steel and Stud — From $73,850
12
100×40 Livestock Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$84,200$73,850SAVE $10,350
or $1539/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Livestock Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Livestock Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Cattle and dairy operators configure the 100×40 with a 12-foot-wide center feed alley flanked by 14-foot bedding areas on each side. 40 feet of width fits roughly 40-50 head of beef cattle in a loose-housing setup. Open.

You're viewing:Livestock Barn·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,850$84,200Save $10,350
or as low as $1539/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$73,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Ridge Vent
  • Open Gables
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-LIVESTOCK-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your production livestock barn.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Ridge vent + sidewall curtains for tunnel airflow. Cattle and dairy operators configure the 100×40 with a 12-foot-wide center feed alley flanked by 14-foot bedding areas on each side.

Housing rows / free stallsCENTER FEED DRIVEMilk room / handling + office100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · production livestock barn

Housing rows / free stalls · Center feed drive · Milk room / handling + office

Housing rows / free stalls at the front, center feed drive in the middle, milk room / handling + office at the rear. Capacity: 40 head production capacity. 40 feet of width fits roughly 40-50 head of beef cattle in a loose-housing setup.

💡 Pro tip:40-50 Head Capacity. Size affords: curtain sidewalls, handling chute wing, manure alley.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Livestock Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock barn
Everyday livestock barn
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock barn + seasonal storage
livestock barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Livestock Barn — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1539/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 livestock barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1539/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Livestock Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Livestock Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 livestock barn cost?

A 100×40 livestock barn from Steel and Stud starts at $73,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1539/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 livestock barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 livestock barn?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 livestock barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 livestock barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 livestock barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1539/month on a 100×40 livestock barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 livestock barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 livestock barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×40 livestock barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$73,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Livestock Barn

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Livestock Barn | Steel and Stud — From $73,850
12
100×40 Livestock Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$84,200$73,850SAVE $10,350
or $1539/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Livestock Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Livestock Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Cattle and dairy operators configure the 100×40 with a 12-foot-wide center feed alley flanked by 14-foot bedding areas on each side. 40 feet of width fits roughly 40-50 head of beef cattle in a loose-housing setup. Open.

You're viewing:Livestock Barn·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,850$84,200Save $10,350
or as low as $1539/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$73,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Ridge Vent
  • Open Gables
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-LIVESTOCK-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your production livestock barn.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Ridge vent + sidewall curtains for tunnel airflow. Cattle and dairy operators configure the 100×40 with a 12-foot-wide center feed alley flanked by 14-foot bedding areas on each side.

Housing rows / free stallsCENTER FEED DRIVEMilk room / handling + office100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · production livestock barn

Housing rows / free stalls · Center feed drive · Milk room / handling + office

Housing rows / free stalls at the front, center feed drive in the middle, milk room / handling + office at the rear. Capacity: 40 head production capacity. 40 feet of width fits roughly 40-50 head of beef cattle in a loose-housing setup.

💡 Pro tip:40-50 Head Capacity. Size affords: curtain sidewalls, handling chute wing, manure alley.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Livestock Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock barn
Everyday livestock barn
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock barn + seasonal storage
livestock barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Livestock Barn — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1539/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 livestock barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1539/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Livestock Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Livestock Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 livestock barn cost?

A 100×40 livestock barn from Steel and Stud starts at $73,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1539/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 livestock barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 livestock barn?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 livestock barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 livestock barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 livestock barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1539/month on a 100×40 livestock barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 livestock barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 livestock barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×40 livestock barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$73,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Indoor Sports Facility

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
100×40 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Indoor Sports Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Indoor Sports Facility, built for hobby and recreational use.

Youth sports clubs and training gyms fit batting cages, pitching tunnels, or a single basketball half-court plus training space into a 100×40. The 100-foot length accommodates three batting cages end-to-end. 16-20 foot.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$73,200
100×70
longer
$128,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 20 ft Eave
  • Clear-Span
  • Insulated Package
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. Youth sports clubs and training gyms fit batting cages, pitching tunnels, or a single basketball half-court plus training space into a 100×40.

2 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

2 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

2 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 2 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court. The 100-foot length accommodates three batting cages end-to-end.

💡 Pro tip:3 Cages End-to-End. Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×40 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 100×40 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×40 indoor sports facility for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor sports facility to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Indoor Sports Facility

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
100×40 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Indoor Sports Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Indoor Sports Facility, built for hobby and recreational use.

Youth sports clubs and training gyms fit batting cages, pitching tunnels, or a single basketball half-court plus training space into a 100×40. The 100-foot length accommodates three batting cages end-to-end. 16-20 foot.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$73,200
100×70
longer
$128,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 20 ft Eave
  • Clear-Span
  • Insulated Package
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. Youth sports clubs and training gyms fit batting cages, pitching tunnels, or a single basketball half-court plus training space into a 100×40.

2 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

2 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

2 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 2 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court. The 100-foot length accommodates three batting cages end-to-end.

💡 Pro tip:3 Cages End-to-End. Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×40 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 100×40 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×40 indoor sports facility for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor sports facility to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Cold Storage Building

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $75,450
12
100×40 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$86,000$75,450SAVE $10,550
or $1572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Cold Storage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×40 as a refrigerated shell with insulated metal panels. 4,000 sq ft holds roughly 200 standard pallets at 34-38°F. Framed openings pre-installed.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,450$86,000Save $10,550
or as low as $1572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$75,450
100×70
longer
$130,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Ready
  • Framed Dock Openings
  • Heavy Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×40 as a refrigerated shell with insulated metal panels.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~66 pallet positions across temp zones. 4,000 sq ft holds roughly 200 standard pallets at 34-38°F.

💡 Pro tip:200 Pallet Capacity. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Cold Storage Building — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 cold storage building cost?

A 100×40 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $75,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 cold storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 cold storage building?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1572/month on a 100×40 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×40 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×40 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$75,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 Cold Storage Building

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $75,450
12
100×40 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$86,000$75,450SAVE $10,550
or $1572/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40Cold Storage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×40 as a refrigerated shell with insulated metal panels. 4,000 sq ft holds roughly 200 standard pallets at 34-38°F. Framed openings pre-installed.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,450$86,000Save $10,550
or as low as $1572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$75,450
100×70
longer
$130,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Ready
  • Framed Dock Openings
  • Heavy Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×40 as a refrigerated shell with insulated metal panels.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~66 pallet positions across temp zones. 4,000 sq ft holds roughly 200 standard pallets at 34-38°F.

💡 Pro tip:200 Pallet Capacity. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Cold Storage Building — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Storage →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 cold storage building cost?

A 100×40 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $75,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 cold storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 cold storage building?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1572/month on a 100×40 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×40 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×40 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 RV & Boat Storage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 RV & Boat Storage | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
100×40 RV & Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40RV & Boat Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 RV & Boat Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Storage operators and HOAs use the 100×40 for enclosed RV and boat bays. At 16-20 foot eave height, Class A motorhomes and wake boats on trailers roll in cleanly. Ten 12-foot-wide bays down the long wall, or five.

You're viewing:RV & Boat Storage·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 20 ft Eave
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-RV-BOAT-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Storage operators and HOAs use the 100×40 for enclosed RV and boat bays.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. At 16-20 foot eave height, Class A motorhomes and wake boats on trailers roll in cleanly.

💡 Pro tip:Class A Clearance. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 RV & Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv & boat storage
Everyday rv & boat storage
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & boat storage + seasonal storage
rv & boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 RV & Boat Storage — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 rv & boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 RV & Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 RV & Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Boat Storage also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 rv & boat storage cost?

A 100×40 rv & boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 rv & boat storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv & boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 rv & boat storage?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 rv & boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 rv & boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 rv & boat storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 100×40 rv & boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 rv & boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 rv & boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×40 rv & boat storage for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & boat storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: primary product hero render (4,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 80×40 source) from Steel and Stud

100×40 RV & Boat Storage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×40 RV & Boat Storage | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
100×40 RV & Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×40RV & Boat Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 RV & Boat Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Storage operators and HOAs use the 100×40 for enclosed RV and boat bays. At 16-20 foot eave height, Class A motorhomes and wake boats on trailers roll in cleanly. Ten 12-foot-wide bays down the long wall, or five.

You're viewing:RV & Boat Storage·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×40
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 20 ft Eave
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-RV-BOAT-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Storage operators and HOAs use the 100×40 for enclosed RV and boat bays.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. At 16-20 foot eave height, Class A motorhomes and wake boats on trailers roll in cleanly.

💡 Pro tip:Class A Clearance. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 RV & Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width100'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv & boat storage
Everyday rv & boat storage
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & boat storage + seasonal storage
rv & boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 RV & Boat Storage — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 rv & boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 RV & Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 RV & Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Boat Storage also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Riding Arena →
🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →
🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church & Event Hall →
🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock Barn →
🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 rv & boat storage cost?

A 100×40 rv & boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 rv & boat storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv & boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 rv & boat storage?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 rv & boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 rv & boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 rv & boat storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 100×40 rv & boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 rv & boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 rv & boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×40 rv & boat storage for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & boat storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

50×80 Hobby Space

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×80 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
50×80 Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
50×80 Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings50×80Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×80 Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 50×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Hobby Space·Size50×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×80
50×80
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X80-HOBBY-SPACEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

50 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 50×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBar + game zoneGuest suite + bath + storage50′ × 80′ · 4,000 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 160+ guests. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×80 Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width50'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby space
Everyday hobby space
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby space + seasonal storage
hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×80 Hobby Space — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×80 hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×80?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 80′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 50×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×80 Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×80 Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Space also viewed:

🏢 50×80

Commercial Warehouse

50×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 50×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Garage

50×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 50×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

50×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →
🌾 50×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

50×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 50×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 50×80

Retail Showroom

50×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 50×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 50×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

50×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏭 50×80

Service / Repair Shop

50×80 service / repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Service / Repair Shop →
🌾 50×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

50×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 50×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🏡 50×80

RV Motorhome Storage

50×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 50×80

Workshop

50×80 workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

50×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏢 50×80

Office

50×80 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 50×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

50×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 50×80 hobby space cost?

A 50×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×80 hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×80 hobby space?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×80 hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×80 hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×80 hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 50×80 hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 50×80 hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×80 hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 50×80 hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

50×80 Hobby Space

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×80 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
50×80 Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
50×80 Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings50×80Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×80 Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 50×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Hobby Space·Size50×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×80
50×80
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X80-HOBBY-SPACEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

50 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 50×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBar + game zoneGuest suite + bath + storage50′ × 80′ · 4,000 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 160+ guests. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×80 Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width50'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby space
Everyday hobby space
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby space + seasonal storage
hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×80 Hobby Space — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×80 hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×80?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 80′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 50×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×80 Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×80 Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Space also viewed:

🏢 50×80

Commercial Warehouse

50×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 50×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Garage

50×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 50×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

50×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →
🌾 50×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

50×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 50×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 50×80

Retail Showroom

50×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 50×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 50×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

50×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏭 50×80

Service / Repair Shop

50×80 service / repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Service / Repair Shop →
🌾 50×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

50×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 50×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🏡 50×80

RV Motorhome Storage

50×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 50×80

Workshop

50×80 workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

50×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏢 50×80

Office

50×80 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 50×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

50×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 50×80 hobby space cost?

A 50×80 hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×80 hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×80 hobby space?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×80 hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×80 hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×80 hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 50×80 hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 50×80 hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×80 hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 50×80 hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

50×80 Workshop

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×80 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
50×80 Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
50×80 Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings50×80Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×80 Workshop, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 50×80 workshop from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Workshop·Size50×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×80
50×80
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X80-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

50 feet wide × 80 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. The 50×80 workshop from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage50′ × 80′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×80 Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop spec sheet.

Width50'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop
Everyday workshop
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop + seasonal storage
workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×80 Workshop — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×80 workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×80?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 80′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 50×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×80 Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×80 Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop also viewed:

🏢 50×80

Commercial Warehouse

50×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 50×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Garage

50×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 50×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

50×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →
🌾 50×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

50×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 50×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 50×80

Retail Showroom

50×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 50×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 50×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

50×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏭 50×80

Service / Repair Shop

50×80 service / repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Service / Repair Shop →
🌾 50×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

50×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 50×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 50×80

Hobby Space

50×80 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 50×80

RV Motorhome Storage

50×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

50×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏢 50×80

Office

50×80 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 50×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

50×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 50×80 workshop cost?

A 50×80 workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×80 workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×80 workshop?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×80 workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×80 workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×80 workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 50×80 workshop.

What warranty comes with the 50×80 workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×80 workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 50×80 workshop for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a workshop to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

50×80 Workshop

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×80 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
50×80 Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
50×80 Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings50×80Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×80 Workshop, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 50×80 workshop from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Workshop·Size50×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×80
50×80
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X80-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

50 feet wide × 80 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. The 50×80 workshop from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage50′ × 80′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×80 Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop spec sheet.

Width50'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop
Everyday workshop
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop + seasonal storage
workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×80 Workshop — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×80 workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×80?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 80′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 50×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×80 Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×80 Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop also viewed:

🏢 50×80

Commercial Warehouse

50×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 50×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Garage

50×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 50×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

50×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →
🌾 50×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

50×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 50×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 50×80

Retail Showroom

50×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 50×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 50×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

50×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏭 50×80

Service / Repair Shop

50×80 service / repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Service / Repair Shop →
🌾 50×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

50×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 50×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 50×80

Hobby Space

50×80 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 50×80

RV Motorhome Storage

50×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

50×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏢 50×80

Office

50×80 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 50×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

50×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 50×80 workshop cost?

A 50×80 workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×80 workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×80 workshop?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×80 workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×80 workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×80 workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 50×80 workshop.

What warranty comes with the 50×80 workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×80 workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 50×80 workshop for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a workshop to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

50×80 Office

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×80 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
50×80 Office | Steel and Stud — From $75,050
12
50×80 Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×80 Office, engineered for code-compliant business use.

The 50×80 office from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Insulated, climate-ready shell sized for a working office — wired-lighting ready with room for desks, meetings, and storage across 4,000 sq ft.

You're viewing:Office·Size50×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×80
50×80
this size
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X80-OFFICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial office layout.

50 feet wide × 80 feet long. Demising-wall ready if you lease half. The 50×80 office from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Open bullpenPrivate offices + conferenceBREAK ROOM + SERVER + STORAGE50′ × 80′ · 4,000 sq ft · commercial office layout

Open bullpen · Private offices + conference · Break room + server + storage

Open bullpen at the front, private offices + conference in the middle, break room + server + storage at the rear. Capacity: 33 workstations + meeting space. Insulated, climate-ready shell sized for a working office — wired-lighting ready with room for desks, meetings, and storage across 4,000 sq ft.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lobby build-out, multiple suites, signage band.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×80 Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Office spec sheet.

Width50'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Office.

DAILY USEEveryday office
Everyday office
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWoffice + seasonal storage
office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×80 Office — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×80 office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×80?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 80′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 50×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×80 Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×80 Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Office also viewed:

🏢 50×80

Commercial Warehouse

50×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 50×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Garage

50×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 50×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

50×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →
🌾 50×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

50×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 50×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 50×80

Retail Showroom

50×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 50×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 50×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

50×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏭 50×80

Service / Repair Shop

50×80 service / repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Service / Repair Shop →
🌾 50×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

50×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 50×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 50×80

Hobby Space

50×80 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 50×80

RV Motorhome Storage

50×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 50×80

Workshop

50×80 workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

50×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏡 50×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

50×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Office questions, answered.

How much does a 50×80 office cost?

A 50×80 office from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×80 office price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×80 office?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×80 office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×80 office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×80 office without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 50×80 office.

What warranty comes with the 50×80 office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×80 office in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×80 office meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

50×80 Office

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×80 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
50×80 Office | Steel and Stud — From $75,050
12
50×80 Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×80 Office, engineered for code-compliant business use.

The 50×80 office from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Insulated, climate-ready shell sized for a working office — wired-lighting ready with room for desks, meetings, and storage across 4,000 sq ft.

You're viewing:Office·Size50×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×80
50×80
this size
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X80-OFFICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial office layout.

50 feet wide × 80 feet long. Demising-wall ready if you lease half. The 50×80 office from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Open bullpenPrivate offices + conferenceBREAK ROOM + SERVER + STORAGE50′ × 80′ · 4,000 sq ft · commercial office layout

Open bullpen · Private offices + conference · Break room + server + storage

Open bullpen at the front, private offices + conference in the middle, break room + server + storage at the rear. Capacity: 33 workstations + meeting space. Insulated, climate-ready shell sized for a working office — wired-lighting ready with room for desks, meetings, and storage across 4,000 sq ft.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lobby build-out, multiple suites, signage band.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×80 Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Office spec sheet.

Width50'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Office.

DAILY USEEveryday office
Everyday office
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWoffice + seasonal storage
office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×80 Office — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×80 office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×80?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 80′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 50×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×80 Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×80 Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Office also viewed:

🏢 50×80

Commercial Warehouse

50×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 50×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Garage

50×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 50×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

50×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →
🌾 50×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

50×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 50×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 50×80

Retail Showroom

50×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 50×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 50×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

50×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏭 50×80

Service / Repair Shop

50×80 service / repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Service / Repair Shop →
🌾 50×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

50×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 50×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 50×80

Hobby Space

50×80 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 50×80

RV Motorhome Storage

50×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 50×80

Workshop

50×80 workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

50×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏡 50×80

Boat & Trailer Storage

50×80 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Office questions, answered.

How much does a 50×80 office cost?

A 50×80 office from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×80 office price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×80 office?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×80 office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×80 office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×80 office without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 50×80 office.

What warranty comes with the 50×80 office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×80 office in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 50×80 office meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×80 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings50×80Boat & Trailer Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 50×80 boat & trailer storage? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Storage·Size50×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×80
50×80
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 12' Eave
  • Coastal Wind Pkg
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X80-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-boat toy garage.

50 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft+ doors clear towers and T-tops upright. Looking for a 50×80 boat & trailer storage? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Multiple boat baysToy hauler / RV slotShop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft50′ × 80′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-boat toy garage

Multiple boat bays · Toy hauler / RV slot · Shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft

Multiple boat bays at the front, toy hauler / rv slot in the middle, shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft at the rear. Capacity: 2+ boats or boat + toy hauler + tow rig. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Wind Pkg. Size affords: drive-through lane, mezzanine gear loft, compressor + rinse bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width50'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer storage
Everyday boat & trailer storage
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×80 boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×80?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 80′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 50×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏢 50×80

Commercial Warehouse

50×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 50×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Garage

50×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 50×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

50×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →
🌾 50×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

50×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 50×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 50×80

Retail Showroom

50×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 50×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 50×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

50×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏭 50×80

Service / Repair Shop

50×80 service / repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Service / Repair Shop →
🌾 50×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

50×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 50×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 50×80

Hobby Space

50×80 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 50×80

RV Motorhome Storage

50×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 50×80

Workshop

50×80 workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

50×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏢 50×80

Office

50×80 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 50×80 boat & trailer storage cost?

A 50×80 boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×80 boat & trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×80 boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×80 boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×80 boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×80 boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 50×80 boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 50×80 boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×80 boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 50×80 boat & trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 50×80 boat & trailer storage typically adds $32,000–$48,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

50′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 50×80 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings50×80Boat & Trailer Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 50×80 boat & trailer storage? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Storage·Size50×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 50×80
50×80
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 12' Eave
  • Coastal Wind Pkg
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-50X80-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-boat toy garage.

50 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft+ doors clear towers and T-tops upright. Looking for a 50×80 boat & trailer storage? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Multiple boat baysToy hauler / RV slotShop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft50′ × 80′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-boat toy garage

Multiple boat bays · Toy hauler / RV slot · Shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft

Multiple boat bays at the front, toy hauler / rv slot in the middle, shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft at the rear. Capacity: 2+ boats or boat + toy hauler + tow rig. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Wind Pkg. Size affords: drive-through lane, mezzanine gear loft, compressor + rinse bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 50×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width50'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer storage
Everyday boat & trailer storage
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 50×80 boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 50×80?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 50′ × 80′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 50×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 50×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 50×80 Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
51×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏢 50×80

Commercial Warehouse

50×80 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 50×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

50×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Garage

50×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 50×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

50×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →
🌾 50×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

50×80 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 50×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

50×80 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 50×80

Retail Showroom

50×80 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 50×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

50×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 50×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

50×80 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏭 50×80

Service / Repair Shop

50×80 service / repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Service / Repair Shop →
🌾 50×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

50×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →
🏛️ 50×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

50×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 50×80

Hobby Space

50×80 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 50×80

RV Motorhome Storage

50×80 rv motorhome storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Motorhome Storage →
🎯 50×80

Workshop

50×80 workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop →
🏢 50×80

Fleet Vehicle Garage

50×80 fleet vehicle garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Vehicle Garage →
🏢 50×80

Office

50×80 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 50×80 boat & trailer storage cost?

A 50×80 boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 50×80 boat & trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 50×80 boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 50×80 boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 50×80 boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 50×80 boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 50×80 boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 50×80 boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 50×80 boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 50×80 boat & trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 50×80 boat & trailer storage typically adds $32,000–$48,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

40×100 Hobby Space

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×100 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×100 Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
40×100 Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×100Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×100 Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 40×100 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Hobby Space·Size40×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×100
40×100
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X100-HOBBY-SPACEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

40 feet wide × 100 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 40×100 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBar + game zoneGuest suite + bath + storage40′ × 100′ · 4,000 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 160+ guests. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×100 Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width40'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby space
Everyday hobby space
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby space + seasonal storage
hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×100 Hobby Space — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×100 hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×100?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 100′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×100 Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×100 Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Space also viewed:

🏢 40×100

Commercial Warehouse

40×100 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×100

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×100 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×100

Fleet Garage

40×100 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×100

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×100 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×100

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×100 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×100

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×100 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×100

Retail Showroom

40×100 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×100

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×100 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×100

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×100 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×100

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×100 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×100

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×100 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🏢 40×100

Office

40×100 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 40×100

Boat & Trailer Storage

40×100 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 40×100 hobby space cost?

A 40×100 hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×100 hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×100 hobby space?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×100 hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×100 hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×100 hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 40×100 hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 40×100 hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×100 hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 40×100 hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

40×100 Hobby Space

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×100 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×100 Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
40×100 Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×100Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×100 Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

The 40×100 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

You're viewing:Hobby Space·Size40×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×100
40×100
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X100-HOBBY-SPACEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

40 feet wide × 100 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. The 40×100 hobby space from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Great-room loungeBar + game zoneGuest suite + bath + storage40′ × 100′ · 4,000 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 160+ guests. Bench walls, tool storage, and open project floor — 4,000 sq ft of year-round workspace with power and dust-collection readiness.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×100 Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width40'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby space
Everyday hobby space
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby space + seasonal storage
hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×100 Hobby Space — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×100 hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×100?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 100′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×100 Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×100 Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Space also viewed:

🏢 40×100

Commercial Warehouse

40×100 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×100

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×100 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×100

Fleet Garage

40×100 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×100

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×100 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×100

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×100 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×100

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×100 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×100

Retail Showroom

40×100 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×100

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×100 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×100

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×100 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×100

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×100 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×100

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×100 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🏢 40×100

Office

40×100 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
🏡 40×100

Boat & Trailer Storage

40×100 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 40×100 hobby space cost?

A 40×100 hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×100 hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×100 hobby space?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×100 hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×100 hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×100 hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 40×100 hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 40×100 hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×100 hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 40×100 hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

40×100 Office

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×100 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×100 Office | Steel and Stud — From $75,050
12
40×100 Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×100 Office, engineered for code-compliant business use.

The 40×100 office from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Insulated, climate-ready shell sized for a working office — wired-lighting ready with room for desks, meetings, and storage across 4,000 sq ft.

You're viewing:Office·Size40×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×100
40×100
this size
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X100-OFFICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial office layout.

40 feet wide × 100 feet long. Demising-wall ready if you lease half. The 40×100 office from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Open bullpenPrivate offices + conferenceBREAK ROOM + SERVER + STORAGE40′ × 100′ · 4,000 sq ft · commercial office layout

Open bullpen · Private offices + conference · Break room + server + storage

Open bullpen at the front, private offices + conference in the middle, break room + server + storage at the rear. Capacity: 33 workstations + meeting space. Insulated, climate-ready shell sized for a working office — wired-lighting ready with room for desks, meetings, and storage across 4,000 sq ft.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lobby build-out, multiple suites, signage band.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×100 Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Office spec sheet.

Width40'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Office.

DAILY USEEveryday office
Everyday office
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWoffice + seasonal storage
office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×100 Office — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×100 office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×100?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 100′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×100 Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×100 Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Office also viewed:

🏢 40×100

Commercial Warehouse

40×100 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×100

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×100 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×100

Fleet Garage

40×100 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×100

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×100 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×100

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×100 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×100

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×100 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×100

Retail Showroom

40×100 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×100

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×100 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×100

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×100 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×100

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×100 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×100

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×100 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 40×100

Hobby Space

40×100 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 40×100

Boat & Trailer Storage

40×100 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Office questions, answered.

How much does a 40×100 office cost?

A 40×100 office from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×100 office price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×100 office?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×100 office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×100 office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×100 office without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 40×100 office.

What warranty comes with the 40×100 office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×100 office in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 40×100 office meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

40×100 Office

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×100 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×100 Office | Steel and Stud — From $75,050
12
40×100 Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×100 Office, engineered for code-compliant business use.

The 40×100 office from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work. Insulated, climate-ready shell sized for a working office — wired-lighting ready with room for desks, meetings, and storage across 4,000 sq ft.

You're viewing:Office·Size40×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×100
40×100
this size
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 4,000 sq ft
  • 14-gauge galvanized frame
  • Free delivery + installation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X100-OFFICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial office layout.

40 feet wide × 100 feet long. Demising-wall ready if you lease half. The 40×100 office from Steel and Stud puts 4,000 sq ft to work.

Open bullpenPrivate offices + conferenceBREAK ROOM + SERVER + STORAGE40′ × 100′ · 4,000 sq ft · commercial office layout

Open bullpen · Private offices + conference · Break room + server + storage

Open bullpen at the front, private offices + conference in the middle, break room + server + storage at the rear. Capacity: 33 workstations + meeting space. Insulated, climate-ready shell sized for a working office — wired-lighting ready with room for desks, meetings, and storage across 4,000 sq ft.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: lobby build-out, multiple suites, signage band.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×100 Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Office spec sheet.

Width40'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Office.

DAILY USEEveryday office
Everyday office
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWoffice + seasonal storage
office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×100 Office — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×100 office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×100?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 100′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×100 Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×100 Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Office also viewed:

🏢 40×100

Commercial Warehouse

40×100 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×100

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×100 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×100

Fleet Garage

40×100 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×100

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×100 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×100

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×100 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×100

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×100 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×100

Retail Showroom

40×100 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×100

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×100 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×100

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×100 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×100

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×100 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×100

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×100 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 40×100

Hobby Space

40×100 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏡 40×100

Boat & Trailer Storage

40×100 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Office questions, answered.

How much does a 40×100 office cost?

A 40×100 office from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×100 office price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×100 office?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×100 office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×100 office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×100 office without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 40×100 office.

What warranty comes with the 40×100 office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×100 office in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 40×100 office meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×100 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×100Boat & Trailer Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 40×100 boat & trailer storage? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Storage·Size40×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×100
40×100
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 12' Eave
  • Coastal Wind Pkg
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X100-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-boat toy garage.

40 feet wide × 100 feet long. 14-ft+ doors clear towers and T-tops upright. Looking for a 40×100 boat & trailer storage? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Multiple boat baysToy hauler / RV slotShop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft40′ × 100′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-boat toy garage

Multiple boat bays · Toy hauler / RV slot · Shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft

Multiple boat bays at the front, toy hauler / rv slot in the middle, shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft at the rear. Capacity: 2+ boats or boat + toy hauler + tow rig. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Wind Pkg. Size affords: drive-through lane, mezzanine gear loft, compressor + rinse bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer storage
Everyday boat & trailer storage
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×100 boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×100?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 100′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏢 40×100

Commercial Warehouse

40×100 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×100

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×100 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×100

Fleet Garage

40×100 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×100

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×100 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×100

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×100 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×100

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×100 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×100

Retail Showroom

40×100 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×100

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×100 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×100

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×100 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×100

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×100 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×100

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×100 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 40×100

Hobby Space

40×100 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏢 40×100

Office

40×100 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×100 boat & trailer storage cost?

A 40×100 boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×100 boat & trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×100 boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×100 boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×100 boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×100 boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 40×100 boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 40×100 boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×100 boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×100 boat & trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×100 boat & trailer storage typically adds $32,000–$48,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

40′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×100 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud — From $73,200
12
40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$83,450$73,200SAVE $10,250
or $1525/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×100Boat & Trailer Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 40×100 boat & trailer storage? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Storage·Size40×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,200$83,450Save $10,250
or as low as $1525/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×100
40×100
this size
$73,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • 12' Eave
  • Coastal Wind Pkg
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X100-BOAT-TRAILER-STOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-boat toy garage.

40 feet wide × 100 feet long. 14-ft+ doors clear towers and T-tops upright. Looking for a 40×100 boat & trailer storage? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Multiple boat baysToy hauler / RV slotShop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft40′ × 100′ · 4,000 sq ft · multi-boat toy garage

Multiple boat bays · Toy hauler / RV slot · Shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft

Multiple boat bays at the front, toy hauler / rv slot in the middle, shop + rinse + mezzanine gear loft at the rear. Capacity: 2+ boats or boat + toy hauler + tow rig. Lake-property owners back a wake boat on a tandem trailer (typically 28-32 ft) into the front, with the rear half holding a fishing boat, jet skis, or seasonal gear.

💡 Pro tip:Coastal Wind Pkg. Size affords: drive-through lane, mezzanine gear loft, compressor + rinse bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer storage
Everyday boat & trailer storage
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage — what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1525/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×100 boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1525/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×100?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 100′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×100 Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🏢 40×100

Commercial Warehouse

40×100 commercial warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Warehouse →
🏭 40×100

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

40×100 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →
🏢 40×100

Fleet Garage

40×100 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×100

Distribution / Fulfillment Bay

40×100 distribution / fulfillment bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Bay →
🌾 40×100

Agricultural Equipment Building

40×100 agricultural equipment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →
🏡 40×100

RV / Boat Storage Building

40×100 rv / boat storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →
🏢 40×100

Retail Showroom

40×100 retail showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail Showroom →
🎯 40×100

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

40×100 indoor sports / training facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →
🏛️ 40×100

Municipal / Public Works Building

40×100 municipal / public works building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →
🏢 40×100

Trucking / Service Terminal

40×100 trucking / service terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking / Service Terminal →
🏛️ 40×100

Worship / Fellowship Hall

40×100 worship / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →
🎯 40×100

Hobby Space

40×100 hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Space →
🏢 40×100

Office

40×100 office configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Office →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×100 boat & trailer storage cost?

A 40×100 boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $73,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1525/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×100 boat & trailer storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×100 boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×100 boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×100 boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×100 boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1525/month on a 40×100 boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 40×100 boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×100 boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×100 boat & trailer storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×100 boat & trailer storage typically adds $32,000–$48,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$73,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena | Steel and Stud — From $137,950
12
75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$157,250$137,950SAVE $19,300
or $2874/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Indoor Equestrian Arena
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equine professionals use this footprint as a small-to-mid riding arena for lessons and working horses through poor weather. 75 wide is tight for full dressage but works for jumping clinics and roping practice. Lean-to.

You're viewing:Indoor Equestrian Arena·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$137,950$157,250Save $19,300
or as low as $2874/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$137,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • Sliding Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-INDOOR-EQUESTRIABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Equine professionals use this footprint as a small-to-mid riding arena for lessons and working horses through poor weather.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 75×100 clear span — jumping + dressage work. 75 wide is tight for full dressage but works for jumping clinics and roping practice.

💡 Pro tip:Open-Span Riding. Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Equestrian Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Equestrian Arena spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Equestrian Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor equestrian arena
Everyday indoor equestrian arena
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor equestrian arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor equestrian arena + seasonal storage
indoor equestrian arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2874/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 indoor equestrian arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2874/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Equestrian Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Equestrian Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Equestrian Arena also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Equestrian Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena cost?

A 75×100 indoor equestrian arena from Steel and Stud starts at $137,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2874/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 indoor equestrian arena price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor equestrian arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor equestrian arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2874/month on a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 indoor equestrian arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 indoor equestrian arena in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 75×100 indoor equestrian arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Equestrian Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$137,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena | Steel and Stud — From $137,950
12
75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$157,250$137,950SAVE $19,300
or $2874/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Indoor Equestrian Arena
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equine professionals use this footprint as a small-to-mid riding arena for lessons and working horses through poor weather. 75 wide is tight for full dressage but works for jumping clinics and roping practice. Lean-to.

You're viewing:Indoor Equestrian Arena·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$137,950$157,250Save $19,300
or as low as $2874/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$137,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • Sliding Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-INDOOR-EQUESTRIABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Equine professionals use this footprint as a small-to-mid riding arena for lessons and working horses through poor weather.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 75×100 clear span — jumping + dressage work. 75 wide is tight for full dressage but works for jumping clinics and roping practice.

💡 Pro tip:Open-Span Riding. Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Equestrian Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Equestrian Arena spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Equestrian Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor equestrian arena
Everyday indoor equestrian arena
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor equestrian arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor equestrian arena + seasonal storage
indoor equestrian arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2874/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 indoor equestrian arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2874/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Equestrian Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Indoor Equestrian Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Equestrian Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Equestrian Arena also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Equestrian Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena cost?

A 75×100 indoor equestrian arena from Steel and Stud starts at $137,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2874/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 indoor equestrian arena price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor equestrian arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor equestrian arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2874/month on a 75×100 indoor equestrian arena.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 indoor equestrian arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 indoor equestrian arena in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 75×100 indoor equestrian arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Equestrian Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$137,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Commercial Workshop

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $139,150
12
75×100 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$158,650$139,150SAVE $19,500
or $2899/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Commercial Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Contractors buying their own shop space spec this as a combined yard, equipment garage and tool crib. Half the building parks bucket trucks and skid-steers; the other half holds a mezzanine with office, parts and crew.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$139,150$158,650Save $19,500
or as low as $2899/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$139,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Mezzanine
  • Walk-In + Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Contractors buying their own shop space spec this as a combined yard, equipment garage and tool crib.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Half the building parks bucket trucks and skid-steers; the other half holds a mezzanine with office, parts and crew break room.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2899/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2899/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 commercial workshop cost?

A 75×100 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $139,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2899/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2899/month on a 75×100 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 75×100 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$139,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Commercial Workshop

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $139,150
12
75×100 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$158,650$139,150SAVE $19,500
or $2899/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Commercial Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Contractors buying their own shop space spec this as a combined yard, equipment garage and tool crib. Half the building parks bucket trucks and skid-steers; the other half holds a mezzanine with office, parts and crew.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$139,150$158,650Save $19,500
or as low as $2899/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$139,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Mezzanine
  • Walk-In + Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Contractors buying their own shop space spec this as a combined yard, equipment garage and tool crib.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Half the building parks bucket trucks and skid-steers; the other half holds a mezzanine with office, parts and crew break room.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2899/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2899/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 commercial workshop cost?

A 75×100 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $139,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2899/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2899/month on a 75×100 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 75×100 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$139,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $139,150
12
75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$158,650$139,150SAVE $19,500
or $2899/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Pallet-Rack Warehouse
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Buyers needing 1,000+ pallet positions spec this 75×100 warehouse kit with 16-20 ft eaves and four rows of 100-foot racking down the column-free interior. R-19 insulation keeps dry goods and parts inventory.

You're viewing:Pallet-Rack Warehouse·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$139,150$158,650Save $19,500
or as low as $2899/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$139,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 3 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-PALLET-RACK-WAREBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Buyers needing 1,000+ pallet positions spec this 75×100 warehouse kit with 16-20 ft eaves and four rows of 100-foot racking down the column-free interior.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions, full forklift ops. R-19 insulation keeps dry goods and parts inventory climate-stable, and three roll-ups on the long wall handle inbound and outbound flow without crossing aisles.

💡 Pro tip:Free Delivery. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pallet-Rack Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pallet-Rack Warehouse spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pallet-Rack Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday pallet-rack warehouse
Everyday pallet-rack warehouse
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pallet-rack warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpallet-rack warehouse + seasonal storage
pallet-rack warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2899/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2899/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pallet-Rack Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pallet-Rack Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pallet-Rack Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pallet-Rack Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse cost?

A 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $139,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2899/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud pallet-rack warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pallet-rack warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2899/month on a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Pallet-Rack Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$139,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $139,150
12
75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$158,650$139,150SAVE $19,500
or $2899/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Pallet-Rack Warehouse
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Buyers needing 1,000+ pallet positions spec this 75×100 warehouse kit with 16-20 ft eaves and four rows of 100-foot racking down the column-free interior. R-19 insulation keeps dry goods and parts inventory.

You're viewing:Pallet-Rack Warehouse·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$139,150$158,650Save $19,500
or as low as $2899/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$139,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 3 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-PALLET-RACK-WAREBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Buyers needing 1,000+ pallet positions spec this 75×100 warehouse kit with 16-20 ft eaves and four rows of 100-foot racking down the column-free interior.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions, full forklift ops. R-19 insulation keeps dry goods and parts inventory climate-stable, and three roll-ups on the long wall handle inbound and outbound flow without crossing aisles.

💡 Pro tip:Free Delivery. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pallet-Rack Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pallet-Rack Warehouse spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pallet-Rack Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday pallet-rack warehouse
Everyday pallet-rack warehouse
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pallet-rack warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpallet-rack warehouse + seasonal storage
pallet-rack warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2899/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2899/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pallet-Rack Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Pallet-Rack Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pallet-Rack Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pallet-Rack Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pallet-Rack Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse cost?

A 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $139,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2899/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud pallet-rack warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pallet-rack warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2899/month on a 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 75×100 pallet-rack warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Pallet-Rack Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$139,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Self-Storage Facility

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $139,150
12
75×100 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$158,650$139,150SAVE $19,500
or $2899/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial buyers carve this 7,500 sq ft footprint into 40-50 climate-controlled storage units with a center drive aisle. Interior steel partitions divide the bays without load-bearing walls. Roll-up doors on each unit.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$139,150$158,650Save $19,500
or as low as $2899/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$139,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Interior Partitions
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your drive-up storage layout.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Back-to-back rows share one covered aisle. Commercial buyers carve this 7,500 sq ft footprint into 40-50 climate-controlled storage units with a center drive aisle.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit rows A + BCenter drive aisleOffice + security corner75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · drive-up storage layout

Unit rows A + B · Center drive aisle · Office + security corner

Unit rows A + B at the front, center drive aisle in the middle, office + security corner at the rear. Capacity: ~56 mixed-size rentable units. Interior steel partitions divide the bays without load-bearing walls.

💡 Pro tip:Multi-Unit Layout. Size affords: climate-controlled wing, cameras + gate, RV parking row.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2899/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2899/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 self-storage facility cost?

A 75×100 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $139,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2899/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2899/month on a 75×100 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 75×100 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$139,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Self-Storage Facility

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $139,150
12
75×100 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$158,650$139,150SAVE $19,500
or $2899/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial buyers carve this 7,500 sq ft footprint into 40-50 climate-controlled storage units with a center drive aisle. Interior steel partitions divide the bays without load-bearing walls. Roll-up doors on each unit.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$139,150$158,650Save $19,500
or as low as $2899/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$139,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Interior Partitions
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your drive-up storage layout.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Back-to-back rows share one covered aisle. Commercial buyers carve this 7,500 sq ft footprint into 40-50 climate-controlled storage units with a center drive aisle.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit rows A + BCenter drive aisleOffice + security corner75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · drive-up storage layout

Unit rows A + B · Center drive aisle · Office + security corner

Unit rows A + B at the front, center drive aisle in the middle, office + security corner at the rear. Capacity: ~56 mixed-size rentable units. Interior steel partitions divide the bays without load-bearing walls.

💡 Pro tip:Multi-Unit Layout. Size affords: climate-controlled wing, cameras + gate, RV parking row.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2899/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2899/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🏢 75×100

Auto Body Shop

75×100 auto body shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Body Shop →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 self-storage facility cost?

A 75×100 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $139,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2899/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2899/month on a 75×100 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 75×100 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$139,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

75×100 Auto Body Shop

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Auto Body Shop | Steel and Stud — From $139,150
12
75×100 Auto Body Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$158,650$139,150SAVE $19,500
or $2899/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Auto Body Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Auto Body Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial buyers running collision and paint operations split this into 8-10 work bays plus a downdraft booth. 14-foot eaves clear two-post lifts with pickup hoods raised. Framed openings for HVAC and a paint booth get.

You're viewing:Auto Body Shop·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$139,150$158,650Save $19,500
or as low as $2899/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$139,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 14' Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-AUTO-BODY-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. Commercial buyers running collision and paint operations split this into 8-10 work bays plus a downdraft booth.

5+ service baysBODY / PAINT WINGParts warehouse + writers + waiting75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · full-service auto center

5+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

5+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 5+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof. 14-foot eaves clear two-post lifts with pickup hoods raised.

💡 Pro tip:Booth-Ready. Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Auto Body Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Body Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Body Shop spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Body Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto body shop
Everyday auto body shop
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto body shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto body shop + seasonal storage
auto body shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Auto Body Shop — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2899/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 auto body shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2899/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Body Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Auto Body Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Auto Body Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Body Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Body Shop also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Body Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 auto body shop cost?

A 75×100 auto body shop from Steel and Stud starts at $139,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2899/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 auto body shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto body shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 auto body shop?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto body shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 auto body shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 auto body shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 auto body shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2899/month on a 75×100 auto body shop.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 auto body shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 auto body shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 75×100 auto body shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Body Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$139,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

75×100 Auto Body Shop

7,500 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

75′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 75×100 steel building delivers 7,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
75×100 Auto Body Shop | Steel and Stud — From $139,150
12
75×100 Auto Body Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$158,650$139,150SAVE $19,500
or $2899/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings75×100Auto Body Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

75×100 Auto Body Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial buyers running collision and paint operations split this into 8-10 work bays plus a downdraft booth. 14-foot eaves clear two-post lifts with pickup hoods raised. Framed openings for HVAC and a paint booth get.

You're viewing:Auto Body Shop·Size75×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$139,150$158,650Save $19,500
or as low as $2899/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 75×100
75×100
this size
$139,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 7,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 14' Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-75X100-AUTO-BODY-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

75 feet wide × 100 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. Commercial buyers running collision and paint operations split this into 8-10 work bays plus a downdraft booth.

5+ service baysBODY / PAINT WINGParts warehouse + writers + waiting75′ × 100′ · 7,500 sq ft · full-service auto center

5+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

5+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 5+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof. 14-foot eaves clear two-post lifts with pickup hoods raised.

💡 Pro tip:Booth-Ready. Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 75×100 Auto Body Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Body Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
7,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 75×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Body Shop spec sheet.

Width75'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space7,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Body Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto body shop
Everyday auto body shop
7,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto body shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto body shop + seasonal storage
auto body shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

75×100 Auto Body Shop — what makes it different.

7,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2899/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 75×100 auto body shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2899/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 75×100?

7,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 75′ × 100′ footprint with 7,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $60,000–$90,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Body Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 75×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 75×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 75×100 Auto Body Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 75×100 Auto Body Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Body Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
76×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$33,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Body Shop also viewed:

🏭 75×100

Fabrication Shop

75×100 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 75×100

Pallet-Rack Warehouse

75×100 pallet-rack warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pallet-Rack Warehouse →
🏭 75×100

Fleet Maintenance Garage

75×100 fleet maintenance garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →
🌾 75×100

Equipment Storage Barn

75×100 equipment storage barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Barn →
🏭 75×100

Manufacturing Space

75×100 manufacturing space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Space →
🌾 75×100

Indoor Equestrian Arena

75×100 indoor equestrian arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$137,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Equestrian Arena →
🏢 75×100

Self-Storage Facility

75×100 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 75×100

Cold Storage Building

75×100 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 75×100

Commercial Workshop

75×100 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$139,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Body Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 75×100 auto body shop cost?

A 75×100 auto body shop from Steel and Stud starts at $139,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2899/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 75×100 auto body shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto body shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 75×100 auto body shop?

Almost always for 7,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto body shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 75×100 auto body shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 75×100 auto body shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 75×100 auto body shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2899/month on a 75×100 auto body shop.

What warranty comes with the 75×100 auto body shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 75×100 auto body shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 75×100 auto body shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Body Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$139,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Commercial Showroom / Retail
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Vehicle, equipment, RV, boat, or building-material showroom with 8,000 sq ft of customer-facing floor space. Add storefront glazing, office partitions, branded trim, and HVAC-ready framing.

You're viewing:Commercial Showroom / Retail·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Storefront Glazing
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-COMMERCIAL-SHOWRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Vehicle, equipment, RV, boat, or building-material showroom with 8,000 sq ft of customer-facing floor space.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~4800 sf showroom, 2400 sf stock. Add storefront glazing, office partitions, branded trim, and HVAC-ready framing.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Showroom / Retail.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Showroom / Retail spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Showroom / Retail.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial showroom / retail
Everyday commercial showroom / retail
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial showroom / retail.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
commercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 commercial showroom / retail is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Showroom / Retail shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Showroom / Retail · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Showroom / Retail also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Showroom / Retail questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail cost?

A 80×100 commercial showroom / retail from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 commercial showroom / retail price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 commercial showroom / retail?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 commercial showroom / retail in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 commercial showroom / retail meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Showroom / Retail quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Commercial Showroom / Retail
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Vehicle, equipment, RV, boat, or building-material showroom with 8,000 sq ft of customer-facing floor space. Add storefront glazing, office partitions, branded trim, and HVAC-ready framing.

You're viewing:Commercial Showroom / Retail·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Storefront Glazing
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-COMMERCIAL-SHOWRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Vehicle, equipment, RV, boat, or building-material showroom with 8,000 sq ft of customer-facing floor space.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~4800 sf showroom, 2400 sf stock. Add storefront glazing, office partitions, branded trim, and HVAC-ready framing.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Showroom / Retail.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Showroom / Retail spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Showroom / Retail.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial showroom / retail
Everyday commercial showroom / retail
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial showroom / retail.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
commercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 commercial showroom / retail is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Showroom / Retail shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Commercial Showroom / Retail

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Showroom / Retail · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Showroom / Retail also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Showroom / Retail questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail cost?

A 80×100 commercial showroom / retail from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 commercial showroom / retail price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 commercial showroom / retail.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 commercial showroom / retail?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 commercial showroom / retail in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 commercial showroom / retail meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Showroom / Retail quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Distribution Hub

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Distribution Hub | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Distribution Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Distribution Hub
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Distribution Hub, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Mid-size logistics layout with dock-leveler-ready openings, drive-through bay options, staging space, and forklift-friendly clear height for pallet racking and inventory movement.

You're viewing:Distribution Hub·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Dock Ready
  • Permit Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-DISTRIBUTION-HUBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Mid-size logistics layout with dock-leveler-ready openings, drive-through bay options, staging space, and forklift-friendly clear height for pallet racking and inventory movement.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Distribution Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Hub spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution hub
Everyday distribution hub
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution hub + seasonal storage
distribution hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Distribution Hub — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 distribution hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Distribution Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Distribution Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Hub · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Hub also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 distribution hub cost?

A 80×100 distribution hub from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 distribution hub price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 distribution hub?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 distribution hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 distribution hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 distribution hub without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 distribution hub.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 distribution hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 distribution hub in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 distribution hub meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Distribution Hub

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Distribution Hub | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Distribution Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Distribution Hub
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Distribution Hub, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Mid-size logistics layout with dock-leveler-ready openings, drive-through bay options, staging space, and forklift-friendly clear height for pallet racking and inventory movement.

You're viewing:Distribution Hub·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Dock Ready
  • Permit Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-DISTRIBUTION-HUBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Mid-size logistics layout with dock-leveler-ready openings, drive-through bay options, staging space, and forklift-friendly clear height for pallet racking and inventory movement.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Distribution Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Hub spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution hub
Everyday distribution hub
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution hub + seasonal storage
distribution hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Distribution Hub — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 distribution hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Distribution Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Distribution Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Hub · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Hub also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 distribution hub cost?

A 80×100 distribution hub from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 distribution hub price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 distribution hub?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 distribution hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 distribution hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 distribution hub without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 distribution hub.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 distribution hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 distribution hub in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 distribution hub meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility | Steel and Stud — From $147,100
12
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$167,700$147,100SAVE $20,600
or $3065/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Agricultural Processing Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed processing, or wash-down agricultural operations under a heavy-duty galvanized steel structure.

You're viewing:Agricultural Processing Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$147,100$167,700Save $20,600
or as low as $3065/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$117,800
80×100
this size
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $38,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-AGRICULTURAL-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your manufacturing facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free bays sized for equipment rows. Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed processing, or wash-down agricultural operations under a heavy-duty galvanized steel structure.

Main production floorASSEMBLY + QC + MAINTENANCEWarehouse + shipping + offices80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · manufacturing facility

Main production floor · Assembly + QC + maintenance · Warehouse + shipping + offices

Main production floor at the front, assembly + qc + maintenance in the middle, warehouse + shipping + offices at the rear. Capacity: full production ops, ~20 workstations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: bridge crane, separated finish rooms, office mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Processing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Processing Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Processing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural processing facility
Everyday agricultural processing facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural processing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
agricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3065/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 agricultural processing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3065/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Processing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Processing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Processing Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Processing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility cost?

A 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $147,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3065/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 agricultural processing facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 agricultural processing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 agricultural processing facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3065/month on a 80×100 agricultural processing facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 agricultural processing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 agricultural processing facility stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Processing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility | Steel and Stud — From $147,100
12
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$167,700$147,100SAVE $20,600
or $3065/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Agricultural Processing Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed processing, or wash-down agricultural operations under a heavy-duty galvanized steel structure.

You're viewing:Agricultural Processing Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$147,100$167,700Save $20,600
or as low as $3065/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$117,800
80×100
this size
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $38,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-AGRICULTURAL-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your manufacturing facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free bays sized for equipment rows. Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed processing, or wash-down agricultural operations under a heavy-duty galvanized steel structure.

Main production floorASSEMBLY + QC + MAINTENANCEWarehouse + shipping + offices80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · manufacturing facility

Main production floor · Assembly + QC + maintenance · Warehouse + shipping + offices

Main production floor at the front, assembly + qc + maintenance in the middle, warehouse + shipping + offices at the rear. Capacity: full production ops, ~20 workstations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: bridge crane, separated finish rooms, office mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Processing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Processing Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Processing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural processing facility
Everyday agricultural processing facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural processing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
agricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3065/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 agricultural processing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3065/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Processing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Processing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Processing Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Processing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility cost?

A 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $147,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3065/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 agricultural processing facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 agricultural processing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 agricultural processing facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3065/month on a 80×100 agricultural processing facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 agricultural processing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 agricultural processing facility stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Processing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Trucking Terminal

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Trucking Terminal | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Trucking Terminal
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Trucking Terminal
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Trucking Terminal, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready openings, drive-through access, clear truck routes, and space for a front office partition.

You're viewing:Trucking Terminal·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Drive-Through
  • Dock Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-TRUCKING-TERMINABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready openings, drive-through access, clear truck routes, and space for a front office partition.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Trucking Terminal in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trucking Terminal.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trucking Terminal spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trucking Terminal.

DAILY USEEveryday trucking terminal
Everyday trucking terminal
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trucking terminal.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrucking terminal + seasonal storage
trucking terminal + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Trucking Terminal — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 trucking terminal is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trucking Terminal shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Trucking Terminal buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Trucking Terminal

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Trucking Terminal · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trucking Terminal also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trucking Terminal questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 trucking terminal cost?

A 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 trucking terminal price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud trucking terminal ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 trucking terminal?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trucking terminal different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 trucking terminal need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 trucking terminal delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 trucking terminal without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 trucking terminal.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 trucking terminal?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 trucking terminal in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 trucking terminal meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Trucking Terminal quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Trucking Terminal

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Trucking Terminal | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Trucking Terminal
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Trucking Terminal
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Trucking Terminal, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready openings, drive-through access, clear truck routes, and space for a front office partition.

You're viewing:Trucking Terminal·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Drive-Through
  • Dock Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-TRUCKING-TERMINABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready openings, drive-through access, clear truck routes, and space for a front office partition.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Trucking Terminal in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trucking Terminal.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trucking Terminal spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trucking Terminal.

DAILY USEEveryday trucking terminal
Everyday trucking terminal
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trucking terminal.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrucking terminal + seasonal storage
trucking terminal + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Trucking Terminal — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 trucking terminal is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trucking Terminal shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Trucking Terminal buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Trucking Terminal

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Trucking Terminal · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trucking Terminal also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trucking Terminal questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 trucking terminal cost?

A 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 trucking terminal price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud trucking terminal ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 trucking terminal?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trucking terminal different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 trucking terminal need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 trucking terminal delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 trucking terminal without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 trucking terminal.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 trucking terminal?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 trucking terminal in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 trucking terminal meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Trucking Terminal quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $148,700
12
80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Warehouse / Inventory Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

8,000 sq ft high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk inventory, parts storage, contractor supplies, or distribution staging. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

You're viewing:Warehouse / Inventory Storage·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,400
80×100
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $42,500
  • Code Certified
  • Rack Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. 8,000 sq ft high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk inventory, parts storage, contractor supplies, or distribution staging.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / inventory storage
Everyday warehouse / inventory storage
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage cost?

A 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $148,700
12
80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Warehouse / Inventory Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

8,000 sq ft high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk inventory, parts storage, contractor supplies, or distribution staging. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

You're viewing:Warehouse / Inventory Storage·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,400
80×100
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $42,500
  • Code Certified
  • Rack Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. 8,000 sq ft high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk inventory, parts storage, contractor supplies, or distribution staging.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / inventory storage
Everyday warehouse / inventory storage
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage cost?

A 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud — From $148,400
12
80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,200$148,400SAVE $20,800
or $3092/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

8,000 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship meals, classroom partitions, youth programs, or community events with insulation and HVAC-ready framing.

You're viewing:Worship Center / Fellowship Hall·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,400$169,200Save $20,800
or as low as $3092/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,100
80×100
this size
$148,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WORSHIP-CENTER-FBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. 8,000 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship meals, classroom partitions, youth programs, or community events with insulation and HVAC-ready framing.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~800 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship center / fellowship hall
Everyday worship center / fellowship hall
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship center / fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3092/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3092/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship Center / Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship Center / Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall cost?

A 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $148,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3092/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3092/month on a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud — From $148,400
12
80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,200$148,400SAVE $20,800
or $3092/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

8,000 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship meals, classroom partitions, youth programs, or community events with insulation and HVAC-ready framing.

You're viewing:Worship Center / Fellowship Hall·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,400$169,200Save $20,800
or as low as $3092/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,100
80×100
this size
$148,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WORSHIP-CENTER-FBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. 8,000 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship meals, classroom partitions, youth programs, or community events with insulation and HVAC-ready framing.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~800 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship center / fellowship hall
Everyday worship center / fellowship hall
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship center / fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3092/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3092/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship Center / Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship Center / Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall cost?

A 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $148,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3092/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3092/month on a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud — From $146,450
12
80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$166,950$146,450SAVE $20,500
or $3051/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, built for hobby and recreational use.

8,000 sq ft indoor sports space for batting cages, practice courts, strength training, cheer, wrestling, pickleball, indoor turf lanes, or multi-use recreation programs.

You're viewing:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$146,450$166,950Save $20,500
or as low as $3051/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$117,150
80×100
this size
$146,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Insulated
  • 20 Clear
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. 8,000 sq ft indoor sports space for batting cages, practice courts, strength training, cheer, wrestling, pickleball, indoor turf lanes, or multi-use recreation programs.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility / indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility / indoor sports
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility / indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3051/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3051/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports cost?

A 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $146,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3051/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3051/month on a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a athletic facility / indoor sports to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$146,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud — From $146,450
12
80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$166,950$146,450SAVE $20,500
or $3051/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, built for hobby and recreational use.

8,000 sq ft indoor sports space for batting cages, practice courts, strength training, cheer, wrestling, pickleball, indoor turf lanes, or multi-use recreation programs.

You're viewing:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$146,450$166,950Save $20,500
or as low as $3051/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$117,150
80×100
this size
$146,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Insulated
  • 20 Clear
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. 8,000 sq ft indoor sports space for batting cages, practice courts, strength training, cheer, wrestling, pickleball, indoor turf lanes, or multi-use recreation programs.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility / indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility / indoor sports
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility / indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3051/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3051/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports cost?

A 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $146,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3051/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3051/month on a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a athletic facility / indoor sports to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$146,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Municipal / Government Facility | Steel and Stud — From $148,400
12
80×100 Municipal / Government Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,200$148,400SAVE $20,800
or $3092/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Municipal / Government Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks department equipment building, or municipal maintenance facility with stamped engineered drawings.

You're viewing:Municipal / Government Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,400$169,200Save $20,800
or as low as $3092/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,100
80×100
this size
$148,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • FEMA Options
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-MUNICIPAL-GOVERNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your civic facility layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Multi-purpose hall converts from court to meeting. Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks department equipment building, or municipal maintenance facility with stamped engineered drawings.

Assembly / multi-purpose hallOffice + records wingKITCHEN + RESTROOMS + STORAGE80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · civic facility layout

Assembly / multi-purpose hall · Office + records wing · Kitchen + restrooms + storage

Assembly / multi-purpose hall at the front, office + records wing in the middle, kitchen + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: assembly for 533 + staff offices.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: commercial kitchen, stage riser, emergency-shelter spec.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal / Government Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal / Government Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal / Government Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal / government facility
Everyday municipal / government facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal / government facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal / government facility + seasonal storage
municipal / government facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3092/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 municipal / government facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3092/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal / Government Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal / Government Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal / Government Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal / Government Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 municipal / government facility cost?

A 80×100 municipal / government facility from Steel and Stud starts at $148,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3092/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 municipal / government facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal / government facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 municipal / government facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal / government facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 municipal / government facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 municipal / government facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 municipal / government facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3092/month on a 80×100 municipal / government facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 municipal / government facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 municipal / government facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 municipal / government facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal / Government Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Municipal / Government Facility | Steel and Stud — From $148,400
12
80×100 Municipal / Government Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,200$148,400SAVE $20,800
or $3092/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Municipal / Government Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks department equipment building, or municipal maintenance facility with stamped engineered drawings.

You're viewing:Municipal / Government Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,400$169,200Save $20,800
or as low as $3092/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,100
80×100
this size
$148,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • FEMA Options
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-MUNICIPAL-GOVERNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your civic facility layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Multi-purpose hall converts from court to meeting. Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks department equipment building, or municipal maintenance facility with stamped engineered drawings.

Assembly / multi-purpose hallOffice + records wingKITCHEN + RESTROOMS + STORAGE80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · civic facility layout

Assembly / multi-purpose hall · Office + records wing · Kitchen + restrooms + storage

Assembly / multi-purpose hall at the front, office + records wing in the middle, kitchen + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: assembly for 533 + staff offices.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: commercial kitchen, stage riser, emergency-shelter spec.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal / Government Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal / Government Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal / Government Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal / government facility
Everyday municipal / government facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal / government facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal / government facility + seasonal storage
municipal / government facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3092/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 municipal / government facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3092/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal / Government Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal / Government Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal / Government Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal / Government Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 municipal / government facility cost?

A 80×100 municipal / government facility from Steel and Stud starts at $148,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3092/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 municipal / government facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal / government facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 municipal / government facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal / government facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 municipal / government facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 municipal / government facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 municipal / government facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3092/month on a 80×100 municipal / government facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 municipal / government facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 municipal / government facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 municipal / government facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal / Government Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, engineered for code-compliant business use.

8,000 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment. Multiple 80×100 or 80×100 roll-up doors keep daily dispatch organized.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $46,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. 8,000 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment.

5 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · fleet service center

5 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

5 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 5+ bays. Multiple 80×100 or 80×100 roll-up doors keep daily dispatch organized.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, engineered for code-compliant business use.

8,000 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment. Multiple 80×100 or 80×100 roll-up doors keep daily dispatch organized.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $46,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. 8,000 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment.

5 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · fleet service center

5 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

5 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 5+ bays. Multiple 80×100 or 80×100 roll-up doors keep daily dispatch organized.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment. Tall doors and 18 to 20 legs allow easy movement of larger inventory.

You're viewing:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Showroom Glazing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. Tall doors and 18 to 20 legs allow easy movement of larger inventory.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv / boat dealership inventory
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory cost?

A 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment. Tall doors and 18 to 20 legs allow easy movement of larger inventory.

You're viewing:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Showroom Glazing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. Tall doors and 18 to 20 legs allow easy movement of larger inventory.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv / boat dealership inventory
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory cost?

A 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Aircraft Hangar

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Aircraft Hangar
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Private operators use a 100×90 prefab building as a hangar for a King Air 350 or twin-engine turboprop with room to spare for tooling and a small lounge. The 100-foot opening on the gable end accommodates a hydraulic.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • Bi-Fold Door Ready
  • 20' Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. Private operators use a 100×90 prefab building as a hangar for a King Air 350 or twin-engine turboprop with room to spare for tooling and a small lounge.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. The 100-foot opening on the gable end accommodates a hydraulic bi-fold door, and 20-foot legs clear most light jet tail heights.

💡 Pro tip:20' Eave. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Aircraft Hangar

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Aircraft Hangar
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Private operators use a 100×90 prefab building as a hangar for a King Air 350 or twin-engine turboprop with room to spare for tooling and a small lounge. The 100-foot opening on the gable end accommodates a hydraulic.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • Bi-Fold Door Ready
  • 20' Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. Private operators use a 100×90 prefab building as a hangar for a King Air 350 or twin-engine turboprop with room to spare for tooling and a small lounge.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. The 100-foot opening on the gable end accommodates a hydraulic bi-fold door, and 20-foot legs clear most light jet tail heights.

💡 Pro tip:20' Eave. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Truck and Fleet Maintenance
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Fleet operators spec a 100×90 with three 100×90 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs.

You're viewing:Truck and Fleet Maintenance·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • Pull-Through
  • Class 8 Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-TRUCK-FLEET-MAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. Fleet operators spec a 100×90 with three 100×90 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs accommodate lifts and exhaust extraction systems.

💡 Pro tip:Class 8 Clearance. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck and Fleet Maintenance spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

DAILY USEEveryday truck and fleet maintenance
Everyday truck and fleet maintenance
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck and fleet maintenance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
truck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck and Fleet Maintenance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck and Fleet Maintenance · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck and Fleet Maintenance also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck and Fleet Maintenance questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance cost?

A 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck and Fleet Maintenance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Truck and Fleet Maintenance
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Fleet operators spec a 100×90 with three 100×90 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs.

You're viewing:Truck and Fleet Maintenance·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • Pull-Through
  • Class 8 Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-TRUCK-FLEET-MAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. Fleet operators spec a 100×90 with three 100×90 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs accommodate lifts and exhaust extraction systems.

💡 Pro tip:Class 8 Clearance. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck and Fleet Maintenance spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

DAILY USEEveryday truck and fleet maintenance
Everyday truck and fleet maintenance
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck and fleet maintenance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
truck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck and Fleet Maintenance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck and Fleet Maintenance · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck and Fleet Maintenance also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck and Fleet Maintenance questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance cost?

A 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck and Fleet Maintenance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Cold Storage Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Cold Storage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Cold storage operators insulate a 100×90 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging. The 9,000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Panels
  • Spray Foam
  • Two-Zone Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Cold storage operators insulate a 100×90 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions across temp zones. The 9,000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an interior partition, with vapor-sealed framed openings sized for thermal roll-ups.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Zone Layout. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Cold Storage Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 cold storage building cost?

A 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 cold storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 cold storage building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Cold Storage Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Cold Storage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Cold storage operators insulate a 100×90 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging. The 9,000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Panels
  • Spray Foam
  • Two-Zone Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Cold storage operators insulate a 100×90 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions across temp zones. The 9,000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an interior partition, with vapor-sealed framed openings sized for thermal roll-ups.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Zone Layout. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Cold Storage Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 cold storage building cost?

A 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 cold storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 cold storage building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Self-Storage Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate investors build a 100×90 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Steel Partitions
  • 60+ Units
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. Commercial real estate investors build a 100×90 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + climate wing + security100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + climate wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + climate wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~67 units incl. drive-thru access. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud partitions divide the interior bays without reframing the shell.

💡 Pro tip:60+ Units. Size affords: drive-thru aisle, climate zone, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×90 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Self-Storage Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate investors build a 100×90 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Steel Partitions
  • 60+ Units
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. Commercial real estate investors build a 100×90 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + climate wing + security100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + climate wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + climate wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~67 units incl. drive-thru access. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud partitions divide the interior bays without reframing the shell.

💡 Pro tip:60+ Units. Size affords: drive-thru aisle, climate zone, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×90 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Indoor Sports Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Recreational developers convert a 100×90 prefab steel building into a batting cage facility, indoor soccer half-pitch, or pickleball center with four courts. Insulated panels stabilize temperature, and skylights with.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Skylights
  • 4 Pickleball Courts
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. Recreational developers convert a 100×90 prefab steel building into a batting cage facility, indoor soccer half-pitch, or pickleball center with four courts.

5 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

5 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

5 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 5 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court. Insulated panels stabilize temperature, and skylights with LED high-bays handle daylight scheduling without window glare.

💡 Pro tip:4 Pickleball Courts. Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 indoor sports facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Indoor Sports Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Recreational developers convert a 100×90 prefab steel building into a batting cage facility, indoor soccer half-pitch, or pickleball center with four courts. Insulated panels stabilize temperature, and skylights with.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Skylights
  • 4 Pickleball Courts
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. Recreational developers convert a 100×90 prefab steel building into a batting cage facility, indoor soccer half-pitch, or pickleball center with four courts.

5 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

5 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

5 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 5 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court. Insulated panels stabilize temperature, and skylights with LED high-bays handle daylight scheduling without window glare.

💡 Pro tip:4 Pickleball Courts. Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 indoor sports facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Warehouse Steel Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Industrial buyers spec the 100×90 warehouse kit for bulk storage of palletized inventory, drum storage, or staged finished goods. At 9,000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with.

You're viewing:Warehouse Steel Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 1,400 Pallet Positions
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-WAREHOUSE-STEEL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Industrial buyers spec the 100×90 warehouse kit for bulk storage of palletized inventory, drum storage, or staged finished goods.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~180 pallet positions, full forklift ops. At 9,000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with room for a small office build-out.

💡 Pro tip:1,400 Pallet Positions. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Steel Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse steel building
Everyday warehouse steel building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse steel building + seasonal storage
warehouse steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 warehouse steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 warehouse steel building cost?

A 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 warehouse steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 warehouse steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 warehouse steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 warehouse steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 warehouse steel building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 warehouse steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 warehouse steel building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 warehouse steel building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Warehouse Steel Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Industrial buyers spec the 100×90 warehouse kit for bulk storage of palletized inventory, drum storage, or staged finished goods. At 9,000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with.

You're viewing:Warehouse Steel Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 1,400 Pallet Positions
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-WAREHOUSE-STEEL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Industrial buyers spec the 100×90 warehouse kit for bulk storage of palletized inventory, drum storage, or staged finished goods.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~180 pallet positions, full forklift ops. At 9,000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with room for a small office build-out.

💡 Pro tip:1,400 Pallet Positions. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Steel Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse steel building
Everyday warehouse steel building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse steel building + seasonal storage
warehouse steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 warehouse steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 warehouse steel building cost?

A 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 warehouse steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 warehouse steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 warehouse steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 warehouse steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 warehouse steel building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 warehouse steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 warehouse steel building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 warehouse steel building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn | Steel and Stud — From $201,350
12
100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$229,550$201,350SAVE $28,200
or $4195/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Event Venue & Wedding Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn, built for hobby and recreational use.

Event operators convert the 100×110 into a 400-seat venue with catering kitchen, bridal suite, and a 100×110 dance floor. Decorative gables, two-tone wainscoting, and Barn Red trim deliver the rustic look; insulated.

You're viewing:Event Venue & Wedding Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$201,350$229,550Save $28,200
or as low as $4195/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$201,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Decorative Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-EVENT-VENUE-WEDDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your banquet hall layout.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered for column-free open span at this width. Event operators convert the 100×110 into a 400-seat venue with catering kitchen, bridal suite, and a 100×110 dance floor.

Stage + greenroomBANQUET FLOOR (916 SEATS)Catering kitchen + bar + restrooms100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · banquet hall layout

Stage + greenroom · Banquet floor (916 seats) · Catering kitchen + bar + restrooms

Stage + greenroom at the front, banquet floor (916 seats) in the middle, catering kitchen + bar + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats 916, full-service banquet. Decorative gables, two-tone wainscoting, and Barn Red trim deliver the rustic look; insulated walls and a permitted HVAC system keep it bookable year-round across all 48 states.

💡 Pro tip:Year-Round Use. Size affords: fixed stage with riser, dressing rooms, separate caterer entrance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Event Venue & Wedding Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Event Venue & Wedding Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Event Venue & Wedding Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday event venue & wedding barn
Everyday event venue & wedding barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a event venue & wedding barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWevent venue & wedding barn + seasonal storage
event venue & wedding barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4195/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 event venue & wedding barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4195/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Event Venue & Wedding Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Event Venue & Wedding Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Event Venue & Wedding Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Event Venue & Wedding Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn cost?

A 100×110 event venue & wedding barn from Steel and Stud starts at $201,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4195/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud event venue & wedding barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud event venue & wedding barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4195/month on a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a event venue & wedding barn to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Event Venue & Wedding Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$201,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn | Steel and Stud — From $201,350
12
100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$229,550$201,350SAVE $28,200
or $4195/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Event Venue & Wedding Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn, built for hobby and recreational use.

Event operators convert the 100×110 into a 400-seat venue with catering kitchen, bridal suite, and a 100×110 dance floor. Decorative gables, two-tone wainscoting, and Barn Red trim deliver the rustic look; insulated.

You're viewing:Event Venue & Wedding Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$201,350$229,550Save $28,200
or as low as $4195/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$201,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Decorative Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-EVENT-VENUE-WEDDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your banquet hall layout.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered for column-free open span at this width. Event operators convert the 100×110 into a 400-seat venue with catering kitchen, bridal suite, and a 100×110 dance floor.

Stage + greenroomBANQUET FLOOR (916 SEATS)Catering kitchen + bar + restrooms100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · banquet hall layout

Stage + greenroom · Banquet floor (916 seats) · Catering kitchen + bar + restrooms

Stage + greenroom at the front, banquet floor (916 seats) in the middle, catering kitchen + bar + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats 916, full-service banquet. Decorative gables, two-tone wainscoting, and Barn Red trim deliver the rustic look; insulated walls and a permitted HVAC system keep it bookable year-round across all 48 states.

💡 Pro tip:Year-Round Use. Size affords: fixed stage with riser, dressing rooms, separate caterer entrance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Event Venue & Wedding Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Event Venue & Wedding Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Event Venue & Wedding Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday event venue & wedding barn
Everyday event venue & wedding barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a event venue & wedding barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWevent venue & wedding barn + seasonal storage
event venue & wedding barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4195/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 event venue & wedding barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4195/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Event Venue & Wedding Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Event Venue & Wedding Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Event Venue & Wedding Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Event Venue & Wedding Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn cost?

A 100×110 event venue & wedding barn from Steel and Stud starts at $201,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4195/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud event venue & wedding barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud event venue & wedding barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4195/month on a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a event venue & wedding barn to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Event Venue & Wedding Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$201,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building | Steel and Stud — From $203,200
12
100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Auto Dealership & Service Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate developers run the 100×110 as an integrated dealership: 60 ft of glass storefront on one gable for the showroom, 50 ft of service bays with eight 100×110 roll-ups along the side wall. Wainscoted.

You're viewing:Auto Dealership & Service Building·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Glass
  • 8 Roll-Ups
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-AUTO-DEALERSHIP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. Commercial real estate developers run the 100×110 as an integrated dealership: 60 ft of glass storefront on one gable for the showroom, 50 ft of service bays with eight 100×110 roll-ups along the side wall.

7+ service baysBody / paint wingPARTS WAREHOUSE + WRITERS + WAITING100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full-service auto center

7+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

7+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 7+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof. Wainscoted curb appeal meets industrial-grade service capacity under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Dealership & Service Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Dealership & Service Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Dealership & Service Building.

DAILY USEEveryday auto dealership & service building
Everyday auto dealership & service building
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto dealership & service building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto dealership & service building + seasonal storage
auto dealership & service building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 auto dealership & service building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Dealership & Service Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Dealership & Service Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Dealership & Service Building also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Dealership & Service Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 auto dealership & service building cost?

A 100×110 auto dealership & service building from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 auto dealership & service building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto dealership & service building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 auto dealership & service building?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto dealership & service building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 auto dealership & service building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 auto dealership & service building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 auto dealership & service building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 auto dealership & service building.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 auto dealership & service building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 auto dealership & service building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 auto dealership & service building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Dealership & Service Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building | Steel and Stud — From $203,200
12
100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Auto Dealership & Service Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate developers run the 100×110 as an integrated dealership: 60 ft of glass storefront on one gable for the showroom, 50 ft of service bays with eight 100×110 roll-ups along the side wall. Wainscoted.

You're viewing:Auto Dealership & Service Building·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Glass
  • 8 Roll-Ups
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-AUTO-DEALERSHIP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. Commercial real estate developers run the 100×110 as an integrated dealership: 60 ft of glass storefront on one gable for the showroom, 50 ft of service bays with eight 100×110 roll-ups along the side wall.

7+ service baysBody / paint wingPARTS WAREHOUSE + WRITERS + WAITING100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full-service auto center

7+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

7+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 7+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof. Wainscoted curb appeal meets industrial-grade service capacity under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Dealership & Service Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Dealership & Service Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Dealership & Service Building.

DAILY USEEveryday auto dealership & service building
Everyday auto dealership & service building
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto dealership & service building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto dealership & service building + seasonal storage
auto dealership & service building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 auto dealership & service building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Dealership & Service Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Dealership & Service Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Dealership & Service Building also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Dealership & Service Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 auto dealership & service building cost?

A 100×110 auto dealership & service building from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 auto dealership & service building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto dealership & service building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 auto dealership & service building?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto dealership & service building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 auto dealership & service building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 auto dealership & service building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 auto dealership & service building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 auto dealership & service building.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 auto dealership & service building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 auto dealership & service building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 auto dealership & service building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Dealership & Service Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable | Steel and Stud — From $202,000
12
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Indoor Riding Arena & Stable
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrian operators pair a 100-ft-wide riding surface with a 20-ft stall row down one long wall — eight 100×110 stalls, tack room, and wash bay. The clear span lets a horse work a full lunge circle. Sliding barn doors.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena & Stable·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Skylights
  • Clear-Span Arena
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Equestrian operators pair a 100-ft-wide riding surface with a 20-ft stall row down one long wall — eight 100×110 stalls, tack room, and wash bay.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×110 clear span — jumping + dressage work. The clear span lets a horse work a full lunge circle.

💡 Pro tip:Clear-Span Arena. Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena & Stable.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena & stable
Everyday indoor riding arena & stable
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena & stable.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena & stable + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena & stable + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena & Stable shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena & Stable also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable cost?

A 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena & stable ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena & stable different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable | Steel and Stud — From $202,000
12
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Indoor Riding Arena & Stable
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrian operators pair a 100-ft-wide riding surface with a 20-ft stall row down one long wall — eight 100×110 stalls, tack room, and wash bay. The clear span lets a horse work a full lunge circle. Sliding barn doors.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena & Stable·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Skylights
  • Clear-Span Arena
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Equestrian operators pair a 100-ft-wide riding surface with a 20-ft stall row down one long wall — eight 100×110 stalls, tack room, and wash bay.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×110 clear span — jumping + dressage work. The clear span lets a horse work a full lunge circle.

💡 Pro tip:Clear-Span Arena. Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena & Stable.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena & stable
Everyday indoor riding arena & stable
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena & stable.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena & stable + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena & stable + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena & Stable shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena & Stable also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable cost?

A 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena & stable ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena & stable different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Carport Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Carport Owners Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their metal carport.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I ordered two carports for the Healthy Schools Healthy Communities grant in Cabool, MO. Bill went above and beyond — thorough on every detail, called me right back, walked me through the whole order. He even followed up on instructions for the slab pour."

HS
Grant Coordinator
Cabool, MO
Metal Carports
Common Questions

Metal Carport FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard carport units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span carports may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a carport with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific carport model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your carport is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your carport with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential carport sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car carports (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car carports (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide carports (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Carport Sizes and Dimensions Guide

Metal carport dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car carports and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car carports (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car carports (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide carports (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length carport. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a Metal Carport Cost in 2026?

Metal carport prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car carport up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel carport prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider carports cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY carport kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 carports per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

Metal Carport Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car carport in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your carport is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart